Upload
naserdodo
View
5.502
Download
7
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Citation preview
Product Description
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Issue 01
Date 2009-01-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 2 of 223
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 3 of 223
About This Document
Author Prepared by Date
Reviewed by Date
Approved by Date
Summary This document includes:
Chapter Description
1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 7500 and its position in the network.
2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in the terms of capacity, interface, boards, OAM and other functions.
3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
4 Software Architecture Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 7500. It includes intelligent software, board software, NE software and NM software.
5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of function, application and protection.
6 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of service classes and application.
7 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 4 of 223
8 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of maintenance and centralized management.
9 Security Management This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of safe operation.
10 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the hardware dimension, interface specifications, transmission performance, environment requirements and power specification for the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This appendix lists the power consumption and weight of the boards that are configured on the OptiX OSN 7500.
11 Compliant Standards This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 7500 conforms in terms of design and performance.
12 Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
13 Acronyms and Abbreviations
The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 5 of 223
History Issue Details Date Author Approved by
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 6 of 223
Contents
1 Network Application......................................................................................................11
2 Function ........................................................................................................................ 14 2.1 Capacity .......................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity ........................................................................................................ 14 2.1.2 Microwave Capacity ............................................................................................................... 15 2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity.............................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Service ............................................................................................................................................ 17 2.2.1 Service Type .......................................................................................................................... 17 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................ 18
2.3 Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 19 2.3.1 Service Interfaces ..................................................................................................................20 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces ..................................................................................21
2.4 Networking Topology ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.5 Protection........................................................................................................................................ 23
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection ...................................................................................................24 2.5.2 Network Level Protection .......................................................................................................24
2.6 Board REG Function....................................................................................................................... 25 2.7 ASON Features...............................................................................................................................27 2.8 Built-in WDM Technology................................................................................................................27 2.9 Microwave Technology ...................................................................................................................28 2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 28 2.11 Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 29 2.12 High Precise Timing...................................................................................................................... 29 2.13 OAM Information Interworking......................................................................................................30 2.14 OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 31
2.14.1 Software Package Loading .................................................................................................. 32 2.14.2 Hot Patch .............................................................................................................................33 2.14.3 NSF Function ....................................................................................................................... 33 2.14.4 Board Version Replacement ................................................................................................33 2.14.5 PRBS Function..................................................................................................................... 34 2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression............................................................................................34 2.14.7 TCM......................................................................................................................................35 2.14.8 ETH-OAM.............................................................................................................................35
2.15 Security Management...................................................................................................................36
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 7 of 223
3 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 37 3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 37 3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................ 39 3.3 Subrack........................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.1 Structure................................................................................................................................. 41 3.3.2 Slot Allocation......................................................................................................................... 42
3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................. 44 3.4.1 Classification of the Boards ...................................................................................................44 3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards.......................................................................... 50 3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 51 3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 56 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 57 3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................... 61 3.4.7 Microwave Boards..................................................................................................................62 3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards ........................................................................................... 62 3.4.9 Other Boards.......................................................................................................................... 63
4 Software Architecture .................................................................................................. 65 4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 65 4.2 Communication Protocols............................................................................................................... 66 4.3 Board Software ...............................................................................................................................66 4.4 NE Software....................................................................................................................................66 4.5 Network Management System........................................................................................................ 67 4.6 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................68
5 Data Features................................................................................................................ 70 5.1 Ethernet Features ........................................................................................................................... 70
5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................70 5.1.2 Application..............................................................................................................................81 5.1.3 Protection ...............................................................................................................................85
5.2 RPR Features ................................................................................................................................. 86 5.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................................88 5.2.3 Application..............................................................................................................................91 5.2.4 Protection ...............................................................................................................................93
5.3 ATM Features.................................................................................................................................. 94 5.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................................94 5.3.2 Application..............................................................................................................................97 5.3.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................100
5.4 DDN Features...............................................................................................................................100 5.4.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................101 5.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................101 5.4.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................102
5.5 SAN Features ...............................................................................................................................103
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 8 of 223
6 ASON Features ........................................................................................................... 104 6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................104
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links...........................................................................................104 6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................106
6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration ................................................................................................106 6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration ..............................................................................107 6.4 ASON Clock Tracing .....................................................................................................................108 6.5 SLA ............................................................................................................................................... 111 6.6 Diamond Services......................................................................................................................... 113 6.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 117 6.8 Silver Services .............................................................................................................................. 119 6.9 Copper Services ...........................................................................................................................121 6.10 Iron Services...............................................................................................................................122 6.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................123 6.12 Service Association.....................................................................................................................126 6.13 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................127 6.14 Service Migration ........................................................................................................................127 6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................128 6.16 Preset Restoring Trail .................................................................................................................128 6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail ...................................................................................................128 6.18 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................130 6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS ............................................................................................130
7 Protection ................................................................................................................... 132 7.1 Equipment Level Protection..........................................................................................................132
7.1.1 TPS Protection .....................................................................................................................133 7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ...................................................134 7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ........................................................................................134 7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards .....................................................................................135 7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................136 7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards...................................................................................137 7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ......................................................................138 7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit ...................................................................138 7.1.9 Intelligent Fans.....................................................................................................................139 7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ...........................................................139 7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ...................................................139
7.2 Network Level Protection..............................................................................................................140 7.2.1 Linear MSP ..........................................................................................................................141 7.2.2 MSP Ring .............................................................................................................................141 7.2.3 SNCP ...................................................................................................................................142 7.2.4 DNI .......................................................................................................................................146 7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection....................................................................................147
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 9 of 223
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP....................................................................................................147 7.2.7 RPR Protection ....................................................................................................................149 7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection................................................................................................150
8 OAM............................................................................................................................. 152 8.1 Operation and Maintenance .........................................................................................................152 8.2 Network Management...................................................................................................................154
9 Security Management ................................................................................................ 155 9.1 Authentication Management .........................................................................................................155 9.2 Authorization Management ...........................................................................................................155 9.3 Network Security Management.....................................................................................................156 9.4 System Security Management......................................................................................................156 9.5 Log Management..........................................................................................................................157
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management .............................................................................................157 9.5.2 Syslog Management ............................................................................................................157
10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 159 10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment .....................................................................................159
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet..............................................................................................160 10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack.............................................................................................160 10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters .................................................................................................161 10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering ...........................................................................................................161 10.1.5 Laser Safety Class.............................................................................................................162 10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance .........................................................................162 10.1.7 Transmission Performance ................................................................................................163 10.1.8 Protection Performance .....................................................................................................163 10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility............................................................................................165 10.1.10 Environmental Specification.............................................................................................166
10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces .........................................................................167 10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces ...................................................................................................168 10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces ...................................................................................................168 10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces .................................................................................................169 10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces .................................................................................................171 10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces .................................................................................................173 10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation........................................................................................................174 10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................175 10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces.......................................................................................................176
10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces......................................................................177 10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces ...................................................................................................178 10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces...................................................................................................178
10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces.......................................................................179 10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications ............................................................................................179 10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications........................................................................................180
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 10 of 223
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications.........................................................................................180 10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications.........................................................................................180 10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications..........................................................................181
10.5 Microwave RF Performance .......................................................................................................181 10.5.1 Radio Work Modes.............................................................................................................182 10.5.2 Frequency Band.................................................................................................................183 10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity............................................................................................................184 10.5.4 Transceiver Performance...................................................................................................186 10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance....................................................................................189 10.5.6 IF Performance ..................................................................................................................190 10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem ................................................190 10.5.8 Equipment Reliability .........................................................................................................190
10.6 Safety Certification......................................................................................................................191 10.7 Environmental Conditions...........................................................................................................192
10.7.1 Environment for Storage ....................................................................................................192 10.7.2 Environment for Transportation..........................................................................................194 10.7.3 Environment for Operation.................................................................................................197
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................199
11 Compliant Standards ............................................................................................... 203 11.1 ITU-T Recommendations............................................................................................................203 11.2 IEEE Standards...........................................................................................................................205 11.3 IETF Standards ...........................................................................................................................206 11.4 ANSI Standards...........................................................................................................................207 11.5 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................207 11.6 EMC Standards ...........................................................................................................................208 11.7 Safety Compliance Standards.....................................................................................................208 11.8 Protection Standards...................................................................................................................209 11.9 ASON Standards.........................................................................................................................209 11.10 Microwave Standards................................................................................................................210
12 Glossary.................................................................................................................... 213
13 Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................. 219
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 11 of 223
1 Network Application
This chapter describes the position and application of the OptiX OSN 7500 intelligent optical switching system (the OptiX OSN 7500) in an optical transmission network.
The OptiX OSN 7500 is the optical core switching (OCS) equipment. It is a next generation equipment that Huawei has developed based on the type of metropolitan area network (MAN) and its development trend in the future.
As an intelligent optical core switching system with large capacity, the OptiX OSN 7500 is mainly used at the backbone layer of the MAN to groom and transmit various services with different granularities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 has 360 Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capacities, and features large switching capacity.
The OptiX OSN 7500 integrates the following technologies:
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) l Ethernet l Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) l Storage area network (SAN) l Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) l Digital data network (DDN) l Automatically switched optical network (ASON) l Microwave Technology
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 12 of 223
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500
As a system used at a higher layer, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be networked with the following equipment to provide a complete MAN solution:
l OptiX OSN 9500 l OptiX OSN 3500 l OptiX OSN 3500T l OptiX OSN 3500 II l OptiX OSN 2500 l OptiX OSN 2500 REG l OptiX OSN 1500
Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 7500 in a transmission network.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 13 of 223
Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 7500
Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . . MicrowaveTechnology
OptiX OSN 9500
Backbonelayer
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 1500
Convergencelayer
Accesslayer
GSM/CDMA/WCDMA/TD-
SCDMA
OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN 3500TOptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN 3500TOptiX OSN 3500 II
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
EthernetStorage Area Network (SAN)
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA)Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)
Microwave Technology
As an intelligent multiservice switching and transmission system, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be used as follows:
l A core convergence node for a large city l An optical core switching (OCS) system for a medium or small city l A service grooming node on a provincial trunk
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 14 of 223
2 Function
2.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity
The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following cross-connect boards: T1GXCSA, T1EXCSA, T2UXCSA, T1SXCSA and T1IXCSA. Table 2-1 lists their cross-connect capacities.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity
Board Higher-Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Access Capacity of Single Subrack
T1GXCSA 240 Gbit/s (1536 x 1536 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4), equivalent to (8064 x 8064 VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
T1EXCSAa 240 Gbit/s (1536 x 1536 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4), equivalent to (16128 x 16128 VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 15 of 223
Board Higher-Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Access Capacity of Single Subrack
T2UXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) equivalent to (8064 x 8064 VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4)
T1SXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) equivalent to (16128 x 16128 VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4)
T1IXCSA 360 Gbit/s (2304 x 2304 VC-4)
80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) equivalent to (32256×32256 VC-12) or (1536×1536 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s (1792 x 1792 VC-4)
a: The T1EXCSA board cannot be used with any line board of the N2 series (except the N2SLQ16). As the T2SL64 board is no longer manufactured, it can be replaced by the T2SL64A board, without affecting the services. It is recommended to use the T1EXCSA board with the T2SL64A board.
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
Table 2-2 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 2-2 Microwave capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment
Equipment Type Maximum Number of Configured IF Boards
Maximum Supported Microwave Capacity (Channel)
OptiX OSN 1500A 2 4
OptiX OSN 1500B 1 2
OptiX OSN 2500 5 10
OptiX OSN 3500 10 20
OptiX OSN 3500T(19inch)
10 20
OptiX OSN 3500II 10 20
OptiX OSN 7500 15 30
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 16 of 223
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 22 service slots. The maximum access capacity varies according to the cross-connect and timing boards installed.
Figure 2-1 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used.
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SLOT5
SLOT6
SLOT7
SLOT8
SLOT9
SLOT10
SLOT11
SLOT12
SLOT13
SLOT14
SLOT15
SLOT16
SLOT18
GX
CS
A(A
) /EX
CS
A(A
)
GX
CS
A(B
) /EX
CS
A(B
)
FANA FANA FANA
SLOT17
Fiber routing Fiber routing
SLOT26
SLOT27
SLOT28
SLOT29
SLOT30
SLOT31
Fiber routing
SLOT25
SLOT24
GSC
C(A
)
GSC
C(B
)
SLOT19
SLOT20
SLOT21
SLOT22
SLOT23
AU
X
PIU
(A)
PIU
(B)
SLOT32
SLOT33
SLOT34
SLOT35
SLOT36
SLOT37
SLOT38
EO
W
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
(A) : Active (B) : Standby
5 G
bit/s
5 G
bit/s
5 G
bit/s
5 G
bit/s
Figure 2-2 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 17 of 223
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SLOT5
SLOT6
SLOT7
SLOT8
SLOT9
SLOT10
SLOT11
SLOT12
SLOT13
SLOT14
SLOT15
SLOT16
SLOT18
UX
CS
A(A
) /S
XC
SA
(A)/
IXC
SA
(A)
UX
CS
A(B
) /S
XC
SA
(B)/
IXC
SA
(B)
FANA FANA FANA
SLOT17
Fiber routing Fiber routing
SLOT26
SLOT27
SLOT28
SLOT29
SLOT30
SLOT31
Fiber routing
SLOT25
SLOT24
GS
CC
(A)
GS
CC
(B)
SLOT19
SLOT20
SLOT21
SLOT22
SLOT23
AU
X
PIU
(A)
PIU
(B)
SLOT32
SLOT33
SLOT34
SLOT35
SLOT36
SLOT37
SLOT38
EO
W
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
20 G
bit/s
(A) : Active ( B) : Standby
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
10 G
bit/s
2.2 Service The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 Service Type
The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
2.2.1 Service Type The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-3.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 18 of 223
Table 2-3 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Service Type Description
SDH services l Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64 l Standard SDH concatenated services:
VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c l Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv
(X≤8), VC3-Xv (X≤24) l SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s
PDH services l E1/T1 service l E3/T3 service l E4 service NOTE
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services l Ethernet private line (EPL) service l Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service l Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service l Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services l EVPL service l EVPLAN service
ATM services l Constant bit rate (CBR) service l Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service l Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services l N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service l Framed E1 service
SAN services l Fiber channel (FC) service l Fiber connection (FICON) service l Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service l Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
(DVB-ASI) service
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
Table 2-4 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500 for accessing different services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 19 of 223
Table 2-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500
Service Type Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack
STM-64 standard or concatenated service
28
STM-64 (FEC) service 17
STM-16 standard or concatenated service
112
STM-16 (FEC) service 22
STM-4 standard or concatenated service
88
STM-1 standard service 280
STM-1 (electrical) service 66
E4 service 16
E3/T3 service 102
E1/T1 service 252
N x 64 kbit/s service (N: 1–31) 32
Framed E1 service 32
FE service 208
GE service 88
10GE service 44
STM-1 ATM service 88
STM-4 ATM service 22
ESCON service 88
FICON/FC100 service 44
FC200 service 22
DVB-ASI service 88
2.3 Interface The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 20 of 223
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-5 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-5 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface Description
SDH service interface
STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz, and can output fixed wavelength and can be directly interconnected with the WDM equipment.
PDH service interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
DDN service interface
Framed E1 RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21
ATM service interface
STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A board IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1 or N1PQM or N1PQMA or N2PQ1 board
Storage area network (SAN) service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 21 of 223
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-6 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-6 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface Type
Description
Administration interface
One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1–S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1) One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH) One administration serial interface (F&f) One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast data interfaces)
Clock interface
Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) External synchronization and synchronous output
Alarm interface
16-input and 4-output alarm interface Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces Four cabinet alarm concatenation input interface
Microwave IF interface
One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two cables to separately connect two ODUs. Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.
2.4 Networking Topology The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 22 of 223
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs:
l Terminal multiplexer (TM) l Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) l Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
l Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with the WDM equipment.
l Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-7 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-7 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
Networking Mode Topology
1 Chain
2 Ring
3 Tangent rings
4 Intersecting rings
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 23 of 223
Networking Mode Topology
5 Ring with chain
6 DNI
7 Hub
8 Mesh
Legends: MADM ADM TM ASON NE
2.5 Protection The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 24 of 223
2.5.2 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-8 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Item Protection Scheme
PDH TPS
DDN TPS
Ethernet processing unit TPS/PPS/BPS/DLAG/1+1 hot backup
ATM 1+1 hot backup
Protection for the Microwave unit 1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup
Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit
Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (N+1 protection)
Cross-connect and timing unit 1+1 hot backup
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup
power interface unit 1+1 hot backup
Intelligent Fans unit The power supply modules are of mutual backup for the three fan modules.
Board Under Abnormal Conditions
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading, Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply and Board Temperature Detection
NOTE The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the coexistence of two different types of TPS protection groups.
2.5.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 25 of 223
Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
SDH protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.6 Board REG Function The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM. See Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG
SL64
SL64
IN OUT
OU T IN
OUT
IN
SL64
IN
OUT
SL64
OptiX OSN 7500
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
SL16 SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
ADM
For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-10.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 26 of 223
Table 2-10 Boards that supports the REG
Board Valid Slots When the Cross-Connect Capacity Is 240 Gbit/s
Valid Slots When the Cross-Connect Capacity is 360 Gbit/s
Function
T2SL64, T2SL64A
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31
N1SL64 Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31
N2SL16, N3SL16
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31
N2SL16A Slots 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31
N3SLN slot 3-8, 11-16, and 26-31
slot 1-8, 11-18, and 26-31
With the REG function enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead and the frame header.
N1SF64, N1SF64A
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and 26-31
With the REG function enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead, the frame header and FEC overhead.
NOTE If the line boards are the N3SLN series, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function only when N is 16.
For the optical interfaces for the REG, see Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Optical interfaces for the REG
Board Optical Interface Type
T2SL64, T2SL64A
I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SL64 I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SF64 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N1SF64A Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je
N2SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2
N3SLN L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 27 of 223
2.7 ASON Features The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 are as follows:
l Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration. l Supports service level agreement (SLA). l Supports mesh networking and protection. l Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide
and improve the bandwidth availability. l Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and
pre-configuration. l Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the
scalability of the network. l Provides ASON clock tracing.
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 7500 according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 7500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.8 Built-in WDM Technology The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are as follows:
l Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped.
l The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
l The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently transmitted.
l Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.
l The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored.
l Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 28 of 223
l Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
l Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.
l Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a long distance.
l Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.9 Microwave Technology The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service transmission.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 7500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of the microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Processing flow of the service signals
Cross -connectboard
MicrowaveIF board ODU
RF signalIF signalBaseband
signal
Antenna
Basebandsignal
Serviceinterfaceboard
PDH/SDH/Ethernet
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following microwave functions:
l Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and modulation mode can be set through software.
l Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the product to interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the microwave frames based on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX RTN 600.
l 1+1 protection and N+1 protection. l Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.
2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into –48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500.
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 29 of 223
The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).
2.11 Clock The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the clock functions.
l SSM clock protocol l Tributary retiming l Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input l External clock output shutdown l Line clock source l Tributary clock source l Three working modes are as follows:
− Tracing mode − Holdover mode − Free-run mode
l ASON clock tracing
For the detailed information of the relevant clock, see the clock topic in the Feature Description.
2.12 High Precise Timing To meet the requirement of precise time synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts the precise time synchronization technology. The time information is accessed in the SDH network and transmitted to the equipment (such as the 3G wireless base station) that requires precise time.
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts the precise time synchronization technology that meets the requirements in IEEE 1588 standard. The system control and communication board (N3GSCC) and the cross-connect board (T1IXCSA) are used to replace the GPS. The time information is accessed through the S1 and S2 interfaces on the T1EOW board and is carried by the line board to synchronize the time in the global network.
The high precise timing function can be enabled only when the working and protection cross-connect and SCC boards are upgraded and support the high precise timing function of an NE.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following line boards that support the time synchronization function.
l 10 Gbit/s rate: N1SL64 and N1SLD64. l 2.5 Gbit/s rate: N3SL16A, N1SLD16 and N1SLQ16.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 30 of 223
l 155 Mbit/s rate: N1SL1A and N1SLQ1A.
The OptiX OSN 7500 contains the data processing board (namely, the N5EFS0 board) that supports the time synchronization function.
The N5EFS0 boards supports the time synchronization function only when it works with the N1EFF8A and N1ETF8A access boards.
2.13 OAM Information Interworking The OptiX OSN 7500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 7500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l HWECC l IP over DCC l OSI over DCC
Table 2-12 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-12 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
DCC Allocation N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Channel type Supports the D1–D1, D1–D3 and D4–D12 channel types.
Mode 1 Supports 160 D1–D3 channels.
Mode 2 Supports 40 D1–D3 channels. Supports 40 D4–D12 channels.
Mode 3 Supports 26 D1–D3 channels. Supports 26 D4–D12 channels.
Mode 4 Supports 12 D1–D3 channels. Supports 12 D4–D12 channels.
Mode 5 Supports 8 D1–D3 channels.
Mode 6 Supports 10 D1–D3 channels.
Mode 7 Supports 70 D1–D3 channels. Supports 30 D4–D12 channels.
Mode 8 Supports 100 D1–D3 channels. Supports 20 D4–D12 channels.
Operation mode
Mode 9 Supports 30 D1–D1 channels. Supports 150 D1–D3 channels.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 31 of 223
DCC Allocation N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Mode 10 Supports 30 D1–D1 channels. Supports 39 D1–D3 channels. Supports 37 D4–D12 channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1
2.14 OAM The OptiX OSN 7500 provides maintenance and management functions.The OAM of the network can be realized by using the T2000. This topic describes the key equipment-level OAM solutions.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation software package loading.
2.14.2 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
2.14.3 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
2.14.5 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 32 of 223
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation software package loading.
Software Package Loading The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
l Users load the software in a uniform operation interface. l The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the
N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board.
l The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the software version of the in-service board does not match the software package, the board software is automatically updated.
l The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load the files required in the current update.
l The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with the same series of SCC boards.
l The NG-SDH equipment supports the anti-mistake package loading function.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:
l Upgrade of the NE software l Replacement of the service boards l Replacement of the auxiliary boards l Replacement of the cross-connect boards l Replacement of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards l Replacement of the CF cards of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards
Simulation Package Loading If a software package needs to be loaded to an NE and if the mapping relation between the NE boards and the software is specified according to the simulation package, you can enable the simulation package loading function to increase the loading efficiency.
The simulation software package includes:
l All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE l Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each
software
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 33 of 223
The simulation software package loading has the following features:
l Simplifying the upgrade operation l Improving the upgrade security l Improving the upgrade efficiency
2.14.2 Hot Patch The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services. l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and
prevents frequent software version upgrade. l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely.
The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.14.3 NSF Function The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the carrier-class requirements.
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms, and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 34 of 223
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part Replacement Design.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If the T2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board.
l The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
2.14.5 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network. During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
l If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board.
l If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:
l For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command on the T2000.
l On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics.
l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result. l The user queries the PRBS statistics result. l The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
For details, refer to PRBS.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 35 of 223
disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
2.14.7 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section.
The N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SLO1, N3SLO1, N2SL4, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N3SLT1, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SLQ16, N2SL16A and T2SL64A boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
l The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point. l The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check. l The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check. l OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
l Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance of the link.
l Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end. l Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance. l Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port. l Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 36 of 223
2.15 Security Management The T2000 uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 7500 NE.
l Authentication management l Authorization Management l Network Security Management l System Security Management l Log Management
For the details of security management, refer to the Security Management.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 37 of 223
3 Hardware
3.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 7500 consists of the cabinet, subrack, and boards.
Figure 3-1 shows the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack installed in an ETSI cabinet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 38 of 223
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 equipment
7
7
W
H
D
1
5
4
3
6
2
7
1. DC PDU
2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution plate
4. Orderwire phone fixing frame
5. Subrack
6. fiber management tray
7. Front door
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame where the cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following units:
l SDH interface unit l PDH interface unit l DDN interface unit l Data (Ethernet/ATM/SAN/Video) processing unit
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 39 of 223
l WDM processing unit l SDH cross-connect matrix unit l Synchronous timing unit l SCC unit l Overhead processing unit l Power interface unit l Auxiliary interface unit l Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Figure 3-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Figure 3-2 System architecture
STM-N opticalsignal
PDH signal
Ethernet signal
DDN signalC
ross
-con
nect
mat
rix
SDH
inte
rface
unit
Ove
rhea
dpr
oces
sing
unit
Syn
chro
nous
timin
g un
it
Aux
iliar
y
Inte
rface
uni
t
SCC
uni
tS
DH
/PD
H/E
ther
net/
ATM
/DD
N in
terfa
cebo
ard SDH signal
ATM signal
3.2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 7500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access –48 V or –60 V power.
Figure 3-3 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 40 of 223
Figure 3-3 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
T63E cabinet N63E cabinet
3.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.3.1 Structure
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 41 of 223
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the lower layer has 18 slots.
3.3.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-8 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Figure 3-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Upper layer processingboard area
Interface board area
Fan area
Lower layer processingboard area
Fiber routing area
Fiber routing area
W
H
D
The functions of the areas are as follows:
l Upper layer processing board area and lower layer processing board area: These areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the equipment.
l Fiber routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 42 of 223
The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the lower layer has 18 slots.
Figure 3-9 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
(A): Active (B): S tandby
L
T
4
LOT15
LOT16
LOT17
LOT18
S
C
S
C
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SLOT5
SLOT6
SLOT7
SLOT8
SLOT9
SLOT10
SLOT11
SLOT12
SLOT13
SLOT14
SLOT15
SLOT16
SLOT18
XCS(
A)
XCS(
B)
FAN
SLOT17
Fiber routing
SLOT26
SLOT27
SLOT28
SLOT29
SLOT30
SLOT31
Fiber routing
SLOT25
SLOT24
GSC
C(A
)
GSC
C(B
)SLOT19
SLOT20
SLOT21
SLOT22
SLOT23
AUX
PIU
(A)
PIU
(B)
SLOT32
33
SLOT34
SLOT35
SLOT36
SLOT37
SLOT38
EO
W
SLOT 39 SLOT 40 FAN FANSLOT 41
SLOT
Fiber routing
Slot Area for Interface Boards l Slots for the service interface boards: slots 19–22 and 35–38. l Slot for the orderwire interface board: slot 23. l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 34.
Slot Area for Processing Boards l Slots for the service processing boards: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31. l Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9–10. l Slots for the PIU boards: slots 32–33.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 43 of 223
l Slots for the system control and communication (SCC) boards: slots 24–25.
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards.
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards
Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 2 Slots 19–20
Slot 3 Slots 21–22
Slot 17 Slots 35–36
Slot 18 Slots 37–38
Paired Slots If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone or realizes the service protection in DPS mode, the two boards that form a ring must be inserted in the paired slots. Table 3-3 lists the paired slots.
Table 3-2 Paired slots
Slot Paired Slot
Slot 1 Slot 18
Slot 2 Slot 17
Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 4 Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 14
Slot 6 Slot 13
Slot 7 Slot 12
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 28 Slot 29
Slot 30 Slot 31
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 44 of 223
3.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards
The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
3.4.6 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
3.4.7 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
3.4.9 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
SDH Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1 rates.
Table 3-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1SL64 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, and N1SLQ4A
4xSTM-4 optical interface board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 45 of 223
Board Description Board Description
T2SL64 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
N1SLD4, N2SLD4, and N1SLD4A
2xSTM-4 optical interface board
T2SL64A 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
N1SLT1 and N3SLT1
12xSTM-1 optical interface board
N1SF64 and N1SF64A
1xSTM-64 optical interface board (with the forward error correction (FEC) function)
N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, and N1SLQ1A
4xSTM-1 optical interface board
N1SLD64 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
N1SL1, N2SL1, and N1SL1A
1xSTM-1 optical interface board
N1SL16, N2SL16, and N3SL16
1xSTM-16 optical interface board
N1SLH1 and N1SLH1A
16xSTM-1 signal processing board
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, and N3SL16A
1xSTM-16 optical interface board
N1SEP1 2xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the front panel 8xSTM-1 line processing board when the interfaces are available on the corresponding interface board
N1SLQ16 and N2SLQ16
4xSTM-16 optical interface board
N2SLO1 and N3SLO1
8xSTM-1 optical interface board
N1SF16 1xSTM-16 optical interface board (with the out-band FEC function)
N3SLN 1xSTM-16/STM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
N1SLO16 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
N3SLD41 2xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
N1SL4, N2SL4, and N1SL4A
1xSTM-4 optical interface board
N3SLQ41 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
PDH Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different impedances.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 46 of 223
Table 3-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1PQ1 and N2PQ1
63xE1 service processing board
N1PD3 and N2PD3
6xE3/T3 service processing board
N1PQM and N1PQMA
63xE1/T1 service processing board
N2PQ3 12xE3/T3 service processing board
N1PL3 and N2PL3
3xE3/T3 service processing board
N1DX1 DDN service accessing and converging board
N1PL3A and N2PL3A
3xE3/T3 service processing board (The interfaces are available on the front panel.)
N1DXA DDN service converging and processing board
N2SPQ4 4xE4/STM-1 electrical processing board
- -
Data Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the data boards that provide the transparent transmission function, switching function, or RPR function.
Table 3-6 lists the data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-5 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1EFT8 8xFE or 16xFE transparent transmission board
N1EMS4 4xGE and 16xFE transparent transmission and converging board
N1EFT8A 8xFE transparent transmission board
N1EMS2 2xGE and 16xFE transparent transmission and converging board
N1EGT2 and N2EGT2
2xGE transparent transmission board
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, and N4EGS4
4xGE switching and processing board
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0
8xFE switching and processing board
N2EGR2 2xGE ring processing board
N1EFS0A 16xFE switching and processing board
N2EMR0 12xFE and 1xGE ring processing board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 47 of 223
Board Description Board Description
N1EFS4, N2EFS4, and N3EFS4
4xFE switching and processing board
N1ADL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board
N2EGS2 and N3EGS2
2xGE switching and processing board
N1ADQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board
N1MST4 4-port multi-service transparent transmission board
N1IDL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service processing board
N1EAS2 2-port 10xGE Layer 2 switching and processing board
N1IDQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service processing board
Interface Boards and Switching and Bridging Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports optical interface boards, electrical interface boards, and switching and bridging boards.
Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-6 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1EU08 8xSTM-1 electrical interface board
N1D12S 32xE1/T1 switching access board (120 ohms)
N1OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface board (LC)
N1D12B 32xE1/T1 access board (120 ohms)
N2OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface board (SC)
N1EFF8 and N1EFF8A
8x100M Ethernet optical interface board
N1D75S 32xE1 switching access board (75 ohms)
N1ETF8 and N1ETF8A
8x100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board
N1MU04 4xE4/STM-1 electrical interface board
N1ETS8 8x10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board
N1D34S 6xE3/T3 switching access board
N1DM12 DDN service interface board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 48 of 223
Board Description Board Description
N1C34S 3xE3/T3 switching access board
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface protection switching board
Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect boards that have different cross-connect capacities.
Table 3-8 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-7 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
T1GXCSA General cross-connect and synchronous timing board
T2SXCSA Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board
T1EXCSAa Enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board
T1IXCSA Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board
T2UXCSA Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board
N2GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC, and N5GSCC
Intelligent system control and communication board
T1SXCSA Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board
- -
a: The T1EXCSA cannot work with the line boards of series N2 (except for the N2SLQ16). The T2SL64 is not delivered any longer and can be replaced with the T2SL64A. It is recommended that you use the T2SL64A with the T1EXCSA.
Auxiliary Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface board and fan board.
Table 3-9 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 49 of 223
Table 3-8 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
T1EOW Orderwire processing board
T1AUX System auxiliary interface board
N1FANA Fan board (high power)
WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing board and optical amplifier board.
Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-9 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
N1FIB Filter isolating board
N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
- -
Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board and microwave power board.
Table 3-11 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-10 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
N1IFSD1 Dual-port IF board
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 50 of 223
Board Description
N1RPWR 6-channel ODU power board
Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards.
Table 3-12 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-11 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1BPA and N2BPA
Optical booster and pre-amplifier board
N1COA, 61COA, and 62COA
Case-shaped optical amplifier
N1BA2 Optical booster amplifier board
N1DCU and N2DCU Dispersion compensation board
N1RPC01 Forward Raman driving board (external)
N1RPC02 Backward Raman driving board (external)
Power Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface board.
Table 3-13 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-12 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board Description
UPM Uninterruptible power module
T1PIU Power interface board
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
Table 3-14 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 51 of 223
Table 3-13 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Full Name Valid Slots
T1GXCSA General cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1EXCSA Enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T2UXCSA Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1SXCSA Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1IXCSA Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
N2GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC, N5GSCC
System control and communication board
Slots 24 and 25
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-14 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
T2SL64, T2SL64A
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 52 of 223
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLD64 If the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable. Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 7–8, 11–12 and 30–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-64.1, S-64.2b LC
N1SL64 Slots 4–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b
LC
N1SF64 Slots 4–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF64A Slots 4–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d
LC
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
LC
N1SLD16 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLO16 If the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable. Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 7–8, 11–12 and 30–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16A, N2SL16A
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 53 of 223
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–2 and 17–18, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31, four optical interfaces can be configured)
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–2 and 17–18, two optical interfaces can be configured), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31, four optical interfaces can be configured)
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N3SLD41, N3SLQ41
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1/I-4, S-1.1/S-4.1, L-1.1/L-4.1, L-1.2/L-4.2, Le-1.2/Le-4.2
LC
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 54 of 223
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
N3SLN Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1/I-4, S-1.1/S-4.1, L-1.1/L-4.1, L-1.2/L-4.2, Le-1.2/Le-4.2, I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, Le-16.2
LC
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08
S-1.1 optical interface
LC
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08
S-1.1 optical interface
SC
N1SLH1, N1SLH1Aa
Slots 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N2SLO1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N3SLO1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 55 of 223
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
N1SLT1 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–2 and 17–18, eight optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31, 12 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31, 12 optical interfaces can be configured)
Interfaces available on the front panel
S-1.1 LC
N3SLT1 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 , 11–18 and 26–31 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 , 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
S-1.1 LC
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC
N1SEP1a Slots 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N1SEP1b Slots 1–3 and 17–18 Interfaces available on the front panel
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 56 of 223
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode
Interface Type Connector
a: The N1SLH1, N1SLH1A and N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS protection. b: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-15 PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2SPQ4 Slots 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 4-port electrical interface board N1MU04
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N1PD3a, N2PD3
Slot 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 6-port electrical interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3a, N2PL3
Slot 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 3-port electrical interface switching board N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3A, N2PL3A
Slot 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PQ3 Slot 2–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 6-port electrical interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PQ1A, N2PQ1A
Slot 1–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
N1PQ1B, N2PQ1B
Slot 1–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1PQM, N1PQMA
Slot 1–3 and 17–18
Interfaces available on the 32-port electrical interface switching board N1D12S and N1D12B
120-ohm E1 interface and 100-ohm T1 interface
DB44
N1DX1 Slots 1–3 and Interfaces available on the N x 64 RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35,
DB28,
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 57 of 223
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector 17–18 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 V.24, X.21, Framed
E1 DB44
a: The N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, and N2PQ3 boards can work with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS protection.
Table 3-16 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot
N1DXA Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
N1DM12 Slots 19–22 and 35–38
N1TSB8 Slots 37 and 38
N1MU04 Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D75S Slots 19–22 and 35–38
N1D12S Slots 19–22 and 35–38
N1D12B Slots 19–22 and 35–38
N1C34S Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D34S Slots 19–22 and 35–38
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-19 lists the data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-17 Data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N3EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–8,
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 58 of 223
Board Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
ZX
Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45 N1EFS0A Slots 2–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
100BASE-FX
LC
Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45 N2EFS0, N4EFS0a
Slots 2–3 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
100BASE-FX
LC
Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8A
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45 N5EFS0 Slots 2–3 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8A
100BASE-FX
LC
N1EFS4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (622 Mbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N3EFS4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N1EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 59 of 223
Board Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–3 and 17–18 (622 Mbit/s) Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX
RJ-45
N1EFT8b
Slots 2–3 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX
LC
N1EFT8A Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (622 Mbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
Interfaces available on the 8-port 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 2–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EMR0
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45, LC
N2EGR2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EMS4 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–3 and
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 60 of 223
Board Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 2–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45
N1EMS2
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 2–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 2–3 and 17–18 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the 8-port Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EAS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (10 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect
Interfaces available on the front panel
10GBASE-LW/LR
LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 61 of 223
Board Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (10 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 1–2 and 17–18 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 3–8, 11–16 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interfaces available on the front panel
X3.296/(DVB-ASI) EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I
LC
a: The N2EFS0, N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 can be used with the N1ETS8 to realize the TPS protection. b: The N1EFT8 provides eight FE electrical interfaces on the front panel. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1ETF8 to process 16-port FE electrical signals. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1EFF8 to process eight FE electrical signals and eight FE optical signals.
Table 3-18 Data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot
N1ETF8, N1ETF8A Slots 19–22 and 35–38
N1EFF8, N1EFF8A Slots 19–22 and 35–38
3.4.6 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 62 of 223
Table 3-20 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-19 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector
N1MR2A Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
N1MR2C Slots 19–22 and 35–38
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
N1LWX Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
TN11MR2 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
TN11MR4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
TN11CMR2 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
TN11CMR4 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
3.4.7 Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
Table 3-21 list the WDM boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-20 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Connector
N1IFSD1 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
IF
N1RPWR Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
- Power supply interface
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
Table 3-22 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 63 of 223
Table 3-21 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector
N1BA2 Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
N1BPA, N2BPA
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
N1DCU, N2DCU
Slots 1–8, 11–18 and 26–31
Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
61COA, N1COAa
Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on the front panel
SC
62COAa Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on the front panel
SC, E2000
ROPa Slot 103 Interfaces available on the front panel
LC
N1RPC01
Slot 104 Interfaces available on the front panel
LSH/APC, LC/PC
N1RPC02
Slot 105 Interfaces available on the front panel
LSH/APC, LC/PC
a: The slots for the COA and ROP displayed on the T2000 are logical slots and not physical slots.
3.4.9 Other Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
Table 3-23 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-22 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Board Valid Slots Connector
T1AUX Slot 34 SMB, RJ-45
T1EOW Slot 23 SMB, RJ-45
T1PIU Slots 32 and 33 Power supply interface
N1FANA Slots 39–41 -
UPMa Slot 50 -
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot 50.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 64 of 223
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 65 of 223
4 Software Architecture
4.1 Overview The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works with other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and NM system.
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "Board Software". The ASON software is also contained in the NE software.
Figure 4-1 Software architecture
High LevelCommunication Module
Communication Module
Equipment ManagementModule
NE software
Network ManagementSystem
Board Software
DatabaseManagement
Module
ASON software
Network side ModuleReal-timemulti-taskoperatingsystem
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 66 of 223
4.2 Communication Protocols Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line internet protocol (SLIP).
4.3 Board Software The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:
l Alarm management l Performance management l Configuration management l Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE.
4.4 NE Software The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and OS function at network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other equipment (including NM and other NEs).
l Real-time multi-task operating system l The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public
resources and support application programs.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 67 of 223
l It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.
l Communication module l The communication module is the interface module between NE software and
board software. l According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software
and the board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment.
l Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance events of the board are reported to the NE software.
l Network Side (NS) Module l The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment
management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.
l Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules: − Qx interface module − Command line interface module − Security management module
l Equipment management module l The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE
management. It includes administrator and agent. l Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events. l Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator,
implement the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of status of the managed object.
l High-level communication module l The high-level communication module exchanges management information
among NEs and between the NM system and the NE. l It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and
ECC communication module. l Database management module l The database management module is a part of the NE software. l It includes two independent parts: data and program. l The data are organized in the form of database, including network database,
alarm database, performance database and equipment database. l The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.5 Network Management System The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 68 of 223
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard management information model as well as object-oriented management technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor and manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis.
l Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets performance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails, subnets and time.
l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment.
l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
l Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path; determines the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the current alarm; analyzes the faulty node and locates the faulty board.
l Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the VC-4 channel that maps the MS protection channel.
4.6 ASON Software According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 69 of 223
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
Cross-connectionmanagement
module
NEsoftware
Signaling module
Routing module
T2000
AOSN software
LMP link managementmodule
Link Management Module By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
l Create and maintain control channels. l Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests. l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l Collect and flood the TE link information. l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane. l Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l Create and delete cross-connections. l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 70 of 223
5 Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements.
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform.
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
5.1.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3, Table 5-4, Table 5-5, Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 list the Ethernet boards that provide the switching function. Table 5-8 lists the Ethernet boards that provide the transparent transmission function.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Interface 4 FE 4 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX
Interface board None None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 71 of 223
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Uplink bandwidth 4 VC-4 8 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs 12 24
Ethernet private line (EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F (Frame–Mapped GFP)
Link state pass through (LPT)
Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access rate (CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Intra-board link aggregation
Not supported Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
NSF Function Not supported Supported
RMON Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 72 of 223
Table 5-2 Function list of EFS0 and EFS0A
Function N2EFS0 N1EFS0A N4EFS0 N5EFS0
Interface 8 FE 16 FE 8 FE 8 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8, N1ETF8A, N1EFF8A
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
24 32 24 24
Ethernet private line (EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
GFP-F GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
GFP-F
Link state pass through (LPT)
Supports P2P LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 73 of 223
Function N2EFS0 N1EFS0A N4EFS0 N5EFS0
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access rate (CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Intra-board link aggregation
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
NSF Function Not supported Not supported
Supported Not supported
RMON Supported
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS2
Function N2EGS2 N3EGS2
Interface 2 GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs 48
EPL Supported
EVPL Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 74 of 223
Function N2EGS2 N3EGS2
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Not supported Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported Supported
RMON Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-4 Function list of EGS4
Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N4EGS4
Interface 4 x GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 75 of 223
Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N4EGS4
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤8)
Number of VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS Supported
PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 76 of 223
Table 5-5 Function list of EMS2
Function N1EMS2
Interface 2 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board Supports 2 x GE if the N1EMS2 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 2 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS2 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
48
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Not supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Not supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 77 of 223
Function N1EMS2
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-6 Function list of EMS4
Function N1EMS4
Interface 4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board Supports 4 x GE if the N1EMS4 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS4 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤8)
Number of VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 78 of 223
Function N1EMS4
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-7 Function list of EAS2
Function N1EAS2
Interface 2 x 10GE
Interface type 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
Interface board None
Service frame format In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink bandwidth
64 VC-4
Mapping mode Virtual concatenation: VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤8) Contiguous concatenations: VC-4-4C
Number of VCTRUNKs
24
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 79 of 223
Function N1EAS2
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS Label Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
IGMP Snooping Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, PORT+VLAN flow, PORT+SVLAN flow and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN flow
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation, and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-8 Function list of EGT2, EFT8 and EFT8A
Function N1EGT2, N2EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A
Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 80 of 223
Function N1EGT2, N2EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A
Interface board None Supports 8 x FE if the N1EFT8 board is not used with an interface board. Supports 16 x FE if the N1EFT8 board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
None
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤8)
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤3)
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x≤63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤3)
Number of VCTRUNKs
2 16 8
Ethernet service types
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS Not supported
VLAN Transparent transmission
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported 802.1ag Not supported Not supported
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 81 of 223
5.1.2 Application The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l EPL Service l EVPL Service l EPLAN Service l EVPLAN Service
EPL Service The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
BPORT2
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterpriseuser
A
B
EVPL Service The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 82 of 223
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters ofcompany A
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterpriseuser
NE 1 NE 2
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Department 1
Department 2
l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 7500 adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services. − EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3. − EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4. − EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Communityuser
Cyber cafeuser
OptiX OSNequipment
VCTRUNK
AA'
NE 1 NE 2
B
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2
B'
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 83 of 223
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS
NE 1 NE 2
PPE P PE
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
`
Add label
Department B
DepartmentA
Branch 1
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Strip label
Branch 2
Department B
Department A
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ
NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
`
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Add label Strip label
DepartmentB
DepartmentA
Branch 1 Branch 2
DepartmentB
DepartmentA
EPLAN Service Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 7500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 5-6.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 84 of 223
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
NE31
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1PORT1 VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 ofcompany A
Port 1
Department 1 ofcompany A
Accesspoint
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Port 1
Department 2 ofcompany A
EVPLAN Service The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 85 of 223
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
NE3
PORT1PORT2
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK2
LSP LSP PORT1PORT2
VCTR
UN
K1
POR
T1PO
RT2 VC
TRU
NK2
S-Aware S-Aware
S-Aware
C-AwareS-Aware
C-Aware
VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3of company B
Department 3of company A
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Department 2of company BDepartment 2
of company ADepartment 1of company B
Department 1of company A
Acesspoint Company A Company B OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 2
C-Aware
5.1.3 Protection OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l LCAS l The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and
decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects and restores failed members.
l For details, refer to . l STP/RSTP l The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid
spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
l For details, refer to STP and RSTP. l Tributary protection switching (TPS) l The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a
protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment.
l For details, refer to 7.1.1 TPS Protection. l Board protection switching (BPS) l The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 86 of 223
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
l For details, refer to BPS. l Port protection switching (PPS) l The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary.
l For details, refer to PPS. l Link aggregation group (LAG) l A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the
same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link.
l For details, refer to LAG. l DLAG l The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is
the protection board. l During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not
switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
l The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive. l For details, refer to DLAG. l LPT l The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected.
l For details, refer to LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features The RPR of the OptiX OSN 7500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 87 of 223
l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.
l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node. l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. l Provide RPR protection.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other.
Figure 5-8 RPR ring
Outer ring control
Node 1
Node 4
Node 3
Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Inner ring data
Outer ring data
Inner ring control
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection schemes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 88 of 223
5.2.2 Functions The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-9 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-9 Function list of RPR boards
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity VC-3: VC-3-xv (x≤2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP.
IGMP Snooping Supported
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic classification
Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link aggregation
Supported
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 89 of 223
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Weighted fairness algorithm
Supported
Topology auto-discovery
Supported
Maximum number of nodes
255
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C
Service Class The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-10 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-10 RPR service class
Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Algorithm
Application
A0 Pre-allocated, irreclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time services
A
A1 Pre-allocated, reclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time services
B_CIR Pre-allocated, reclaimable
Medium
Irrelevant Near real-time services
B
B_EIR Preemptible, not pre-allocated
High Relevant Near real-time services
C C Preemptible, not pre-allocated
High Relevant Best effort transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 90 of 223
Spatial Reuse On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved.
Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Bandwidth of single ring is1.25Gbit/s
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic 11.25 Gbit/s
Traffic 21.25 Gbit/s
Fairness Algorithm The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 91 of 223
Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
23
Traffic Bandwidth400 Mbit/s400 Mbit/s400 Mbit/s
1
Node3Node4
Node WeightNode2 1
11
Node 3
3
Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
Node 3
3
Node3Node4
Node WeightNode2 1
32
23
Traffic Bandwidth400 Mbit/s600 Mbit/s200 Mbit/s
1
5.2.3 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
EVPL Service The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 92 of 223
packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.
Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
ActionTunnel
VCDestination
Insertion100100
Node 4
LSP ActionTunnel
VC
Stripping100100
Action Forwarding
Node 4FE/GEFE/GE
Node 2
Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE
FE
GE
Node 2 Node 4
Traffic Tunnel Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
VC
200 Node 2200
Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3300
Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4400
FE
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
VLAN 4
VLAN 4
VLAN 3VLAN 2
EVPLAN Service The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 93 of 223
Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.
Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2 Node 4
MAC stack VLANPortA1 noneA2 noneport 2B1 100rpr1
Port 1
B2 100rpr1C1 100rpr1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
A1
B1
B2
C1
port 1
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC forwarding table of node 2
A2
MAC stack VLANPortA1 100A2 100rpr1B1 noneport 1B2 noneport 2C1 100rpr1
rpr1
5.2.4 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering l When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an
automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
l In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
l In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 94 of 223
new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
l For details, refer to RPR. l LCAS l The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects
the bandwidth. l For details, refer to LCAS. l RSTP l The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP
realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
l For details, refer to STP and RSTP. l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP l At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used. l For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
5.3 ATM Features This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.
Table 5-11 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 95 of 223
Table 5-11 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel interface
1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching capability
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM multicast connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-12 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 96 of 223
Table 5-12 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1
Function IDL4 IDQ1
Front panel interface
1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface Not supported
IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1.1 standards)
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQMA or N1PQM or N2PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching capability
1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM multicast connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection operation mode (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 97 of 223
Function IDL4 IDQ1
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Board level 1+1 protection
Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types The OptiX OSN 7500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not support ABR services.
l The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency.
l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate. l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 7500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-13.
Table 5-13 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type Service Type
Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
UBR.1 Clp01Pcr 2 atmNoClpNoScr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 98 of 223
No. Traffic Type Service Type
Parameter
UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-15, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Figure 5-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
2.5 Gbit/s SDH
Ring
NE 2 NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
34M ATM
Traffic
155M ATM 622M ATM
ServiceConvergence
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 99 of 223
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-16, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
Figure 5-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
VC4-XvVP/VC-Ring
NE 2
NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATMTraffic
34M ATMTraffic
155M ATMTraffic
622M ATMTraffic
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped tothe NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring
after converged with local service.
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the IMA service networking.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 100 of 223
Figure 5-17 IMA service networking
STM-16 two-fiberbidirectional MSP
ring
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
25km
35km 30km
40km
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 3
NodeB 2
NodeB 4
5.3.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
l ATM layer protections l The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a
combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.
l For details, refer to ATM/IMA. l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP l The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed).
l For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP. l 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards l The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. l For details, refer to ATM/IMA.
5.4 DDN Features This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 101 of 223
5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.
5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
5.4.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.
Table 5-14 lists the functions and features of the DDN.
Table 5-14 Functions and features of DDN
Board Feature Description
Processing capability
Processes eight N x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s and 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH side
48 x E1,and 63 x E1.
Interface specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
Interface impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals.
Protection Supports 1:N(N≤4) TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported.
Alarm and performance
A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
5.4.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 102 of 223
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network.
l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers l Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
Figure 5-18 DDN networking and application
Enterprise userOptiX NE
4 x 64kNG-SDH
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Frame E1 Frame E1
4 x 64k Headquartersof company A
Headquartersof company B
Branch ofcompany A
Branch ofcompany B
As shown in Figure 5-18, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH network.
For details, see the Planning Guide.
5.4.3 Protection The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports one group of 1:N (N≤4) TPS protection for the N1DX1 boards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 103 of 223
5.5 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 (2125 Mbit/s) service or two FC100 services are supported.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100 (1062.5 Mbit/s )supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON (200 Mbit/s)or 4 x DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s) services.
l All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 104 of 223
6 ASON Features
6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 6-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 105 of 223
Figure 6-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. See Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Management of control topology
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 106 of 223
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 6-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time.
Figure 6-3 TE link auto-discovery
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 107 of 223
network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 6-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity. l Choose the server level. l Choose the source node. l Choose the sink node. l Create the service.
Figure 6-4 End-to-end service configuration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 108 of 223
As shown in Figure 6-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 6-5 Trail restoration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
6.4 ASON Clock Tracing ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
l Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
l The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 109 of 223
Clock Protection Protocol To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start the standard SSM protocol.
Primary Reference Clock Source Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.
l Line clock source l External clock source l Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 6-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 6-6 ASON clock subnet
Primary baseclock source Standby base
clock sourceA
BITS BITS
B
:ASON NE
: BITS
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 110 of 223
Interfacing Mode By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock quality.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided.
l If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 111 of 223
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
6.5 SLA The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Service level
Service Protection and Restoration Scheme
Implementation Means
Switching and Rerouting Time
Diamond service
Protection and restoration
SNCP and rerouting
Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold service
Protection and restoration
MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s
Silver service
Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
Copper service
No protection No restoration
- -
Iron service
Preemptable MSP -
Table 6-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 112 of 223
Table 6-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level Working Resource of TE Link
Protection Resource of TE Link
Non-Protection Resource of TE Link
Service creation
Not used Not used Used
Service rerouting
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Used with the priority
Diamond service
Service optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service creation
Used with the priority
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Service rerouting
Used with the priority
Used when the resource is not enough
Used when the resource is not enough
Gold service
Service optimization
Used with the priority
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Service creation
Not used Not used Used
Service rerouting
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Used with the priority
Silver service
Service optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service creation
Not used Not used Used Copper service Service
optimization Not used Not used Used
Service creation
Not used Used with the priority
Used when the resource is not enough
Iron service
Service optimization
Not used Used with the priority
Used when the resource is not enough
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 113 of 223
6.6 Diamond Services Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 6-7 shows a diamond service.
Figure 6-7 Diamond Services
:ASON NE
:User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
Protection LSP
Working LSP
There are three types of diamond services.
l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails. l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail. l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 6-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 114 of 223
Table 6-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Protection and restoration
l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout. l Supports rerouting priority. l Supports three rerouting policies:
− Use existing trails whenever possible
− Do not use existing trails whenever possible
− Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive. l After the automatically revertive diamond service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Service migration l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Support diamond ASON server trails.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 115 of 223
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 6-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
Protection and restoration
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout. l Supports rerouting priority. l Supports three rerouting policies:
− Use existing trails whenever possible − Do not use existing trails whenever
possible − Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive. l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Service migration
l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching
Supports manual switching.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 116 of 223
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association
Does not support service association.
ASON server trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 6-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
Protection and restoration
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered.
Service migration
l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching
Supports manual switching.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association
Does not support service association.
ASON server trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 117 of 223
6.7 Gold Services Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 6-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 6-8 Gold services
R1
R2
R3
R4
:ASON NE
:User equipment
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
MSP
MSP
MSPI
Table 6-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 6-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 118 of 223
Multiplex section protection
l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
Protection and restoration
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout. l Supports rerouting priority. l Supports three rerouting policies:
− Use existing trails whenever possible
− Do not use existing trails whenever possible
− Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive. l After the automatically revertive gold service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 119 of 223
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services.
l Supports migration between gold services and diamond services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
6.8 Silver Services Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 6-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 120 of 223
Figure 6-9 A silver service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
IELSP after rerouting
Original LSP
Table 6-7 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 6-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout. l Supports rerouting priority. l Supports three rerouting policies:
− Use existing trails whenever possible
− Do not use existing trails whenever possible
− Best route
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 121 of 223
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled revertive. l After the automatically revertive silver service is
rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, the user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh restoration trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive silver trials.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper services.
Service optimization l Supports service optimization. l If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be
optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
6.9 Copper Services The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute and are interrupted. Table 6-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 122 of 223
Table 6-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional services.
l Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.
l Supports migration between copper services and gold services.
l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association
Supports service association.
ASON server trail
Supports ASON server trails.
6.10 Iron Services The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 6-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 123 of 223
Table 6-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used: l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP l Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
6.11 Tunnels Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 6-10.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 124 of 223
Figure 6-10 Tunnel
R1
R2
R3
R4
VC4 tunnel VC12 service
: ASON NE
: User equipmentASON domain
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As shown in Figure 6-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a diamond ASON server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 6-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
NE1 NE2
VC12ASON server trail
VC4
VC12
Cross-connection
Line unitTributary unit
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 125 of 223
Table 6-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 6-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute Diamond Tunnel
Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper Tunnel
Requirements for creation
Same as diamond services
Same as gold services
Same as silver services
Same as copper services
Service restoration
Same as diamond services
Same as gold services
Same as silver services
Does not support rerouting
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
Does not support rerouting
Revertive Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Pre-configuration of restoring route
Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Service association
Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
Service migration
l Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.
l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels. l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels. l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels. l Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels. l Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels. l Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Tunnel level
VC-4
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 126 of 223
6.12 Service Association The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 6-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 6-12 Service association
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
1+1 protection
1+1 protection
Table 6-11 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 6-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service creation Supports the creation of the associated services with the same source node.
Service optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 127 of 223
Attribute Service Association
Service type l Supports the association of two silver services. l Supports association of two copper services. l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper
service. l Supports the association of two silver tunnels. l Supports the association of two copper tunnels. l Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
6.13 Service Optimization After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported. l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service. l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are
not allowed. l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting
operations, optimization is not allowed. l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper
and tunnel services.
6.14 Service Migration OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections l Migration between gold services and permanent connections l Migration between silver services and permanent connections l Migration between copper services and permanent connections l Migration between iron services and permanent connections l Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 128 of 223
Service Migration between ASON Trails Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels
6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually.
6.16 Preset Restoring Trail Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail firstly.
6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 6-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 129 of 223
Figure 6-13 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1
Share MESHrestoration trail 1
A B C
G
D E F
H
Revertive silver service 2
Share MESHrestoration trail 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.
l A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute cannot be changed.
l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of TE links.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.
l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some resources.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 130 of 223
6.18 Shared Risk Link Group In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 6-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
Figure 6-14 LCAS (different path)
Router BRouter ANE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
Path 1
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 6-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 131 of 223
Figure 6-15 LCAS (same path)
Router BRouter ANE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
ASON Trail Group An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 132 of 223
7 Protection
7.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies.
7.1.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner.
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1 protection.
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N≤3) protection.
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 133 of 223
The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
7.1.1 TPS Protection The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 7-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 7-2 lists the TPS protection parameters.
Table 7-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service Type
Protection Scheme
Supported Boards Revertive Mode
E1/T1 One 1:N protection (N ≤ 4)
N1PQM, N1PQMA, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
E3/T3/E4/STM-1
One 1:N protection (N ≤ 3)
N1PD3, N1PL3, N2SPQ4, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SEP1
Ethernet One 1:1 protection
N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0, N1EFS0A
DDN One 1:N protection (N ≤ 4)
N1DX1
Revertive
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 7-2 TPS protection parameters
Parameter Description
Priority 1–X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching, and automatic switching.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The clock of the working board is lost. l The working board is offline. l The working board is cold reset. l The hardware of the working board fails. l A switching command is issued.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 134 of 223
Parameter Description
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 7-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Table 7-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Slot 9 and slot 10
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The working board is offline. l The working board is cold reset. l The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is
triggered. l The hardware of the working board fails. l A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions.
The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
Table 7-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 135 of 223
Table 7-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Slot 24 and slot 25
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The working board is offline. l The working board is under a cold reset. l The hardware of the working board fails. l A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection.
The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.
Table 7-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 7-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Slots for working and protection boards
The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth of the working board.
Switching condition
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The port status of the working
board is Link Down. l The clock of the working board
is lost. l The hardware of the working
board fails. l The working board is off line. l A switching command is
issued.
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The port to be protected on the
working board is in the Link Down state.
l The clock of the working board is lost.
l The hardware of the working board fails.
l The working board is off line. l The working board fails to
transmit and receive packets, but the protection board transmits and receives packets
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 136 of 223
Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG successfully.
Switching time
≤ 350 ms In full duplex mode: ≤ 4 s In auto-negotiation mode: ≤ 500 ms
Revertive mode
Non-revertive mode l Revertive (default) l Non-revertive
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection switching, the following conditions must be met.
l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group.
l The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.
l The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1 protection.
The N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be configured.
Table 7-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 7-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Configured as required.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 137 of 223
Parameter Description
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l A manual switching command is issued. l The working board is offline. l The working board is under a cold reset. l The power supply of the working board fails. l The clock of the working board fails. l The hardware of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N≤3) protection.
Table 7-7 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards
Parameter Description
Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met)
The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is faulty. The hardware of the ODU is faulty. POWER_FAIL VOLT_LOS (IF board) RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RADIO_RSL_HIGH IF_INPWR_ABN CONFIG_NOSUPPORT R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS MW_LOF MW_RDI The board is offline.
Switching time ≤500 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300–720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 138 of 223
Table 7-8 N+1 protection for the microwave boards
Parameter Description
Switching condition (the switching occurs if one condition is met)
R_LOS R_LOF R_LOC MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD(Optional condition) MW_LOF The board is offline.
Switching time ≤50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300–720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 7500 can access two –48 V DC power supplies by using two T1PIU boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 7500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.
Table 7-9 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Table 7-9 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Configurable as required.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 139 of 223
Parameter Description
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l The hardware of the working board fails. l A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.
The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan module.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the T1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 140 of 223
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
7.2 Network Level Protection The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.
7.2.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
7.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
7.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 141 of 223
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
7.2.1 Linear MSP The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N≤14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 120 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System Planning Guidelines.
7.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 7-10 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 7-10 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported
STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring 7
STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring 14
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 22
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 40
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 142 of 223
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth The The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 7500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.
MS Squelching The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 7500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol module triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a line board, the cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching status of the handshake detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the squelching status with the relevant information stored on the cross-connect board. If the squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the cross-connect board issues a command to correct the MS squelching status.
7.2.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, and AU-3 services.
SNCP The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 7-1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 143 of 223
Figure 7-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7NE6
The unprotected trail
NE1NE4
NE3NE2
NE5NE8
NE7NE6
The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trailConvert to an unprotected trail
The protction trail
The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 7500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP protection pairs.
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
l Manual switching to protection path l Manual switching to working path l Forced switching to protection path l Forced switching to working path l Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting l Revertive mode setting
SNCMP The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme.
The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 7500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 1008 SNCMP protection groups.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 144 of 223
Figure 7-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.
Figure 7-2 Principle of multipath protection
Source Sink
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 3
Intermediatesubnetworks
A B
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 7-3, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 7-3 SNCMP networking
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 7-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 145 of 223
Figure 7-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 7-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.
Figure 7-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
SNCTP The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 896 SNCTP groups.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 146 of 223
7.2.4 DNI The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l Two SNCP rings l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring l Two MSP rings
Figure 7-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
Figure 7-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
SNCP Ring1
SNCP Ring2
NE E
NE DNE C
NE F
NE G
NE A
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. l A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. l NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. l NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. l NE C and NE E are faulty. l NE D and NE F are faulty.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 147 of 223
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 7-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 7-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-16SNCP
STM-16MSP
STM-64ST
M-6
4
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. The T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SL64, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N1SLO16, N2SL16, N1SF16, N3SL16, N1SF64, and N1SF64A boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF64 and SL64 boards support STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s.
Figure 7-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 148 of 223
Figure 7-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
STM-16/64
STM-4/16 STM-4/16
STM-4/16STM-4/16
STM-4/16Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
STM-16
STM-16
STM-64
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2
The OptiX OSN 7500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared protection group in two directions, as shown in Figure 7-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 7-10 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 149 of 223
7.2.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 7-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring.
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
Figure 7-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 7-12.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 150 of 223
Figure 7-12 RPR wrapping protection
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5Inner ring
RPR
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 RPR steering protection
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 1Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
RPR
Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 151 of 223
Figure 7-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
Figure 7-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Working pathATM
service
Protection path
ATMservice
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 152 of 223
8 OAM
8.1 Operation and Maintenance The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 7500 are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 7500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management l In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual
alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures. l The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces,
four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
l Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly.
l Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000, the NE reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not report excessive alarms.
l The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an alarm by pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface.
l The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms.
l The working temperature of certain boards can be queried. l When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a
performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service state only.
ALS Function The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 153 of 223
shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.
l After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management l The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
and Ethernet optical interfaces. l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH
optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength.
l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which facilitates the maintenance.
l The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other. l The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and
alarms of each equipment in a network. l The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE
software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 7500 system.
l The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N1PQMA, N2PQ1 line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the collection according to the requirement.
l The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a new version are the same as the configuration and service status of the board of a old version old.
l Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
l The alarms of the services can be queried. l The connectivity status of the services can be determined. l The faulty node can be analyzed.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 154 of 223
l The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment.
l The port status can be queried. l The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities
can be traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities. l The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be
queried. l The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted
according to the daylight saving time in the country.
8.2 Network Management The OptiX OSN 7500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 155 of 223
9 Security Management
9.1 Authentication Management Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user name and a valid password.
l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
l Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE.
l NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
l NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
l Query the online NE users.
9.2 Authorization Management Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l NE user management: − According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels,
which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
− According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
− Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag. − Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority,
or change the user flag. − Delete NE users.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 156 of 223
l NE user group management: − According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided
into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
− Modify the group of a user.
9.3 Network Security Management Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively manage the NEs.
l The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
l Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL. − For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule
only to check the source address of the IP packets only. − For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL
rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
− If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
− Query the ACL rule. − Modify the ACL rule. − Delete the ACL rule.
l An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods: − Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to
access it over the Ethernet network. − Access through the serial interface. − Access through the OAM port. − Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized
or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM access function can be enabled when necessary.
l Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000.
l When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and password) is encrypted.
9.4 System Security Management Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly.
l Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 157 of 223
l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
l Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password. l Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts. l Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts. l Query or set the password uniqueness.
9.5 Log Management The OptiX OSN 7500 provides log management functions.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
9.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
l Query the security logs of the NE. l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
9.5.2 Syslog Management The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports:
l Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol l Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP l Adding and deletion of Syslog servers l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers
at the same time l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog
server and the NE
Figure 9-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 158 of 223
the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 9-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NMS
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server Breal timesecurity log
TCP/IP
NE A(client)
NE B
NE C(client)
NE D
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all NEs in a network. A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log server. In Figure 9-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Optical Switching System Configuration Guide.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 159 of 223
10 Technical Specifications
10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser safety class, timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance, protection performance, and environmental specification.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks.
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption.
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
The equipment supports the access of the –48 V or –60 V DC power.
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
10.1.7 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
10.1.8 Protection Performance
The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 160 of 223
The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.
10.1.10 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of permitted subracks.
Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Permitted Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (T63E)
55 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (N63E)
42 1
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
79 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (T63E)
60 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (N63E)
45 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
84 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) (T63E)
70 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
94 2
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power consumption.
Table 10-2 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
496.4 (W) x 295 (D) x 756.7 (H) 30 (net weight of the subrack that
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 161 of 223
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) is not installed with boards)
Table 10-3 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-3 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Maximum Power Consumption Fuse Capacity
1000 W 32 A
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters The equipment supports the access of the –48 V or –60 V DC power.
Table 10-4 lists the power supply parameters.
Table 10-4 Power supply parameters
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V
Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V
Maximum power consumption
1000 W
Maximum current 25 A
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-5 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2 (7-1)
TUG2 (7-2)
TUG2 (7-3)
TUG (7-4)
TUG (7-5)
TUG (7-6)
TUG (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
TU-3 (3-2)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
TU-3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 162 of 223
TUG2 (7-1)
TUG2 (7-2)
TUG2 (7-3)
TUG (7-4)
TUG (7-5)
TUG (7-6)
TUG (7-7)
(3-3) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
Table 10-6 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II)
TUG2 (7-1)
TUG2 (7-2)
TUG2 (7-3)
TUG2 (7-4)
TUG2 (7-5)
TUG2 (7-6)
TUG2 (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1)
1 22
43
4 25
46
7 28
49
10
31
52
13
34
55
16
37
58
19
40
61
TU-3 (3-2)
2 23
44
5 26
47
8 29
50
11
32
53
14
35
56
17
38
59
20
41
62
TU-3 (3-3)
3 24
45
6 27
48
9 30
51
12
33
54
15
36
57
18
39
60
21
42
63
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
Table 10-7 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Table 10-7 Laser safety class
Laser Safety Class
Board
Class 1 N1SL64, T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SF64, N1SF64A, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N1SLO16, N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N3SLO1, N3SLN, N3SLQ41, N3SLD41, N3SL41, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SLT1, N3SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SLH1, N1SLH1A, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGT2, N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4, N1EAS2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8
Class 4 N1RPC01, N1RPC02
Class 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, N1IFSD1
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 163 of 223
Table 10-8 lists the timing and synchronization performance.
Table 10-8 Timing and synchronization performance
Performance Description
Output Jitter ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
10.1.7 Transmission Performance The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 10-9 lists the transmission performance.
Table 10-9 Transmission performance
Performance Description
Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826
10.1.8 Protection Performance The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
Linear MSP Table 10-10 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 10-10 Linear MSP parameters
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Protocol
Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Condition
1+1 single-ended switching
Non-revertive
Not required
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 single-ended switching
Revertive Not required
≤ 50 ms 600s
1+1 dual-ended switching
Non-revertive
APS protocol
≤ 50 ms -
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l R_LOF l MS_AIS l B2_EXC
B2_SD
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 164 of 223
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Protocol
Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Condition
1+1 dual-ended switching
Revertive APS protocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
1:N (N≤14) dual-ended switching
Revertive APS protocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
MSP Ring Table 10-11 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Table 10-11 MSP ring parameters
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Mode Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Condition
Two-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive l Forced switching
l Manual switching
l Exercise switching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP
Revertive l Forced switching
l Manual switching
l Exercise switching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive l Forced switching - ring
l Manual switching - ring
l Exercise switching - ring
l Forced switching - span
l Manual switching - span
l Exercise switching - span
≤ 50 ms 600s
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l R_LOF l MS_AIS l B2_EXC l B2_SD l Forced
switching l Manual
switching l Exercise
switching
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 165 of 223
SNCP Table 10-12 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 10-12 SNCP parameters
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Conditions
Revertive ≤50 ms 600s SNCP
Non-revertive
≤50 ms -
Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC4 level SNCP: l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l B2_EXC l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B3_EXC (Optional) l B3_SD (Optional) l HP_UNEQ (Optional) l HP_TIM (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC3 level SNCP: l TU_LOP l TU_AIS l B3_EXC (Optional) l B3_SD (Optional) Any of the following alarms triggers the switching of VC12 level SNCP: l TU_LOP l TU_AIS l BIP_EXC (Optional) l BIP_SD (Optional)
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 10-13 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 166 of 223
Table 10-13 EMC test results
Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports
CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A
Immunity to radiated electromagnetic field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz–2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: ±8 kV; contact discharge: ±6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: ±1 kV, line to ground: ±2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5 (±1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous voltage dips and short interruption and voltage variation for DC power port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-29
10.1.10 Environmental Specification The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 10-14.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 167 of 223
Table 10-14 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Specifications Description
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0 to 45
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance
Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information on wavelength allocation.
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces.
10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces.
10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces.
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 168 of 223
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
Table 10-15 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-15 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Application code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1260 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–15 to –8
–19 to –14
–15 to –8
–5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–23 –31 –28 –34 –34 –34
Minimum overload (dBm)
–8 –14 –8 –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10
10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces.
Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-16 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Application code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 169 of 223
Parameter Value
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–15 to –8 –15 to –8
–3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –23 –28 –28 –28 –34
Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8 –8 –8 –13
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5
10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces.
Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-17 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Application code
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2Je
V-16.2Je (BA)
U-16.2Je (BA+PA)
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 25 25 to 50
50 to 80
80 to 105
105 to 145
145 to 200
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
1530 to 1560
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 170 of 223
Parameter Value
Without the booster amplifier (BA): –2 to +3
Without the BA or pre-amplifier (PA): –2 to +3
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–10 to –3
–5 to 0 –2 to +3
–2 to +3
5 to +7
With the BA: 13 to 15
With the BA: 15 to 18
Without the BA or PA: –28
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28
With the PA: –32
Without the BA or PA: –9
Minimum overload (dBm)
–3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9
With the PA: –10
Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)
12 - - 1200 to 1600
2000 2800 3400
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Table 10-18 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-18 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2666057 kbit/s
Application code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Meaning of the codea FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 171 of 223
Parameter Value
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Without the BA or PA: –5 to –1
Without the BA or PA: –5 to –1
Without the BA, RA, or PA: –5 to –1
Launched optical power range (dBm)
With the BA: 13 to 15
With the BA: 13 to 15
With the BA: 15 to 18
Without the BA or PA: –27.5
Without the BA or PA: –27.5
Without the BA, RA, or PA: –27.5
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
With the PA: –37
With the PA: –37
With the PA: –42
Minimum overload (dBm)b –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)c
10 10 10
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used. b: The parameter values are only for the PA. c: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier are not provided.
10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 10-19 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-19 Parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application code
I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2b
L-64.2b (BA)
Le-64.2
Ls-64.2
V-64.2b (BA+PA+DCU)
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to 25
2 to 35 35 to 80
35 to 55
55 to 75
80 to 152
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 172 of 223
Parameter Value
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Without the BA: –4 to +2
Without the BA, PA, or DCU: –4 to –1
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–6 to –1
–5 to –1
–1 to +2
With the BA: 13 to 15
2 to 4 4 to 7
With the BA: 13 to 15
Without the BA, PA, or DCU: –14
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–11 –14 –14 –14 –21 –21
With the PA: –26
Minimum overload (dBm)
–1 –1 –1 –1 –8 –8 –1
Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)
6.6 500 800 1600 1200 1600 2040 (with the DCU)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
6 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Table 10-20 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-20 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 10709225 kbit/s
Application code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
Meaning of the codea
FEC + BA (14 dB) + PA + DCU (60 + 80)c
FEC + BA (17 dB) + PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB) + RA + PA + DCU (60 x 3)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 173 of 223
Parameter Value
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)b
–4 to –1 –4 to –1 –4 to –1
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)b
–14 –14 –14
Minimum overload (dBm)b
–1 –1 –1
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b
10 10 10
Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)b
800 800 800
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used. b: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided. c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different dispersion compensation values.
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s 2666057 kbit/s
9953280 kbit/s
10709225 kbit/s
Dispersion-limited distance (km)
170 640 640 40 40
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 174 of 223
Parameter Value
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–2 to +3
–5 to –1 –5 to –1 –4 to –1 –4 to –1
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28 –28 –28 –14 –14
Minimum overload (dBm)
–9 –9 –9 –1 –1
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/nm)
3400 12800 12800 800 800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 10 10
With the FEC: 16
With the FEC: 20
Optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) (dB)
Without the FEC: 21
Without the FEC: 21
Without the FEC: 26
Without the FEC: 26
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the output of the wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 10-22 provides the wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 10-22 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 175 of 223
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3u. Table 10-23 lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces.
Table 10-23 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Type of Interface
Type of Fiber
Launched Optical Power (dBm)
Operating Wavelength Range (nm)
Minimum Overload (dBm)
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum Extinction Ratio (dB)
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
Single-mode LC
–2 to +5 1500 to 1580
–3 –22 9
1000BASE-VX (40 km)
Single-mode LC
–4.5 to 0 1275 to 1350
–3 –23 9
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 176 of 223
Type of Interface
Type of Fiber
Launched Optical Power (dBm)
Operating Wavelength Range (nm)
Minimum Overload (dBm)
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum Extinction Ratio (dB)
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Single-mode LC
–9 to –3 1270 to 1355
–3 –19 9
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
Multi-mode LC
–9.5 to 0 770 to 860
0 –17 9
100BASE-FX (15 km)
Single-mode LC
–15 to –8 1261 to 1360
–7 –28 10
100BASE-FX (2 km)
Single-mode LC
–19 to –14 1270 to 1380
–14 –30 10
10GBASE-LR (LAN)
Single-mode LC
-6 to -1 1260 to 1355
0.5 -12.6 3.5
10GBASE-LW (WAN)
Single-mode LC
-6 to -1 1260 to 1355
0.5 -12.6 3.5
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 10-24 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-25 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-24 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Application code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 177 of 223
Parameter Value
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
–19 to –14
–15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–31 –28 –34 –34 –34
Minimum overload (dBm)
–14 –8 –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10 10
Table 10-25 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Application code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28 –28 –28 –34
Minimum overload (dBm)
–8 –8 –8 –13
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 10.5
10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN electrical interfaces.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 178 of 223
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-26 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces
Type of Electrical Interface
1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
139264 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
B8ZS, AMI
HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI
Signal bit rate at the output interface
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed frequency deviation at the input interface
Allowed attenuation at the input interface
Input jitter tolerance
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces
Type of Interface
Description Standard
Framed E1 interface
Framed E1 signal
The physical and electrical characteristics of the interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure of the interface complies with ITU-T G.704.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 179 of 223
Type of Interface
Description Standard
V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and RS-422A).
RS-530 interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
Nx64 kbit/s interface
RS-530A interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.
10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232 interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 Specifications of the clock interface
Specifications Description
Output frequency accuracy
Compliant with G.813
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 180 of 223
Specifications Description
Output jitter 0.05 UIpp
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate 64 kbit/s
Timing signals From RX
Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Compliant Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Incoming interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Specifications of the RS-232 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels ±5V–±15V
10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.
The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 10-31.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 181 of 223
Table 10-31 Specifications of the RS-422 interface
Specifications Description
Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels ±2.0V
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 10-32.
Table 10-32 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface
Specifications Description
Speech channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz–3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain –4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/–7/0 dB
Signalling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23
Analog EOW extension
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz–3400 Hz
Tx level –3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr
Rx level –3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr
10.5 Microwave RF Performance This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance of the modem, and link reliability.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 182 of 223
10.5.2 Frequency Band
Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity
Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance
Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance
The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for fighting against multipath fading.
10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals.
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals.
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames.
Table 10-33 Radio work modes
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
4E1 QPSK 7
4E1 16QAM 3.5
8E1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8E1 16QAM 7
16E1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16E1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
STM-1 128QAM 28
22E1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26E1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
32E1 128QAM 14 (13.75)
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 183 of 223
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
35E1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44E1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53E1 64QAM 28 (27.5)
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by
the OptiX RTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
10.5.2 Frequency Band Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports two types of ODUs, that is, standard power ODU (SP ODU) and high power ODU (HP ODU). The following three table respectively list the frequency information on three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU.
Table 10-34 Frequency Band (SP ODU)
Frequency Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz 7.093–7.897 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz 7.731–8.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.675–11.745 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.751–13.248 266
15 GHz 14.403–15.348 315, 322, 420, 490, 728
18 GHz 17.685–19.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz 21.200–23.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz 24.549–26.453 1008
38 GHz 37.044–39.452 1260
Table 10-35 Frequency Band (SPA ODU)
Frequency Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
6 GHz 5.850–6.425 (L6) 6.425–7.125 (U6)
252.04, 300 (L6) 340 (U6)
7 GHz 7.093–7.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 184 of 223
Frequency Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
8 GHz 8.279–8.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.700–11.700 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.751–13.248 266
15 GHz 14.400–15.358 420, 490
18 GHz 17.685–19.710 1008, 1010
23 GHz 21.200–23.618 1008, 1232
Table 10-36 Frequency Band (HP ODU)
Frequency Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz 7.093–7.897 154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz 7.731–8.497 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.675–11.745 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.751–13.248 266
15 GHz 14.400–15.358 315, 322, 420, 475, 490, 640, 644, 728
18 GHz 17.685–19.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz 21.200–23.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz 24.250–26.453 800, 1008
32 GHz 31.815–33.383 812
38 GHz 37.044–40.105 700, 1260
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 185 of 223
l For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value. l As listed in the following three tables, the radio work modes corresponding to the receiver
sensitivity use the microwave frame structure based on TU or STM-1.
Table 10-37 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (i)
Performance
4xE1 8xE1 16xE1
Item
QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM
RSL@BER=10–6 (dBm)
@6GHz –91.5 –87.5 –88.5 –84.5 –85.5 –81.5
@7GHz –91.5 –87.5 –88.5 –84.5 –85.5 –81.5
@8GHz –91.5 –87.5 –88.5 –84.5 –85.5 –81.5
@11GHz –91.0 –87.0 –88.0 –84.0 –85.0 –81.0
@13GHz –91.0 –87.0 –88.0 –84.0 –85.0 –81.0
@15GHz –91.0 –87.0 –88.0 –84.0 –85.0 –81.0
@18GHz –91.0 –87.0 –88.0 –84.0 –85.0 –81.0
@23GHz –90.5 –86.5 –87.5 –83.5 –84.5 –80.5
@26GHz –90.0 –86.0 –87.0 –83.0 –84.0 –80.0
@32GHz –89.0 –85.0 –86.0 –82.0 –83.0 –79.0
@38GHz –88.5 –84.5 –85.5 –81.5 –82.5 –78.5
Table 10-38 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (ii)
Performance
22xE1 26xE1 32xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1
Item
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
RSL@BER=10–6 (dBm)
@6GHz –80.5 –76.5 –73.0 –79.0 –77.5 –73.5
@7GHz –80.5 –76.5 –73.0 –79.0 –77.5 –73.5
@8GHz –80.5 –76.5 –73.0 –79.0 –77.5 –73.5
@11GHz –80.0 –76.0 –72.5 –78.5 –77.0 –73.0
@13GHz –80.0 –76.0 –72.5 –78.5 –77.0 –73.0
@15GHz –80.0 –76.0 –72.5 –78.5 –77.0 –73.0
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 186 of 223
Performance
22xE1 26xE1 32xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1
Item
32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM
@18GHz –80.0 –76.0 –72.5 –78.5 –77.0 –73.0
@23GHz –79.5 –75.5 –72.0 –78.0 –76.5 –72.5
@26GHz –79.0 –75.0 –71.5 –77.5 –76.0 –72.0
@32GHz –78.0 –74.0 –70.5 –76.5 –75.0 –71.0
@38GHz –77.5 –73.5 –70.0 –76.0 –74.5 –70.5
Table 10-39 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (iii)
Performance
STM-1
Item
128QAM
RSL@BER=10–6 (dBm)
@6GHz –69.5
@7GHz –69.5
@8GHz –69.5
@11GHz –69.0
@13GHz –69.0
@15GHz –69.0
@18GHz –69.0
@23GHz –68.5
@26GHz –68.0
@32GHz –67.0
@38GHz –66.5
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
The following three table lists the transceiver performances of three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 187 of 223
Table 10-40 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 25.5 21.0 15.0
@8GHz 25.5 21.0 15.0
@11GHz 24.5 20 14
@13GHz 24.5 20 14
@15GHz 24.5 20 14
@18GHz 24 20 14
@23GHz 22.5 19 13
@26GHz 22 18 12
@38GHz 20.5 16 10
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
–4
Nominal maximum receive power (dBm)
–20
Frequency stability (ppm)
±5
Table 10-41 Transceiver Performance (SPA ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@6GHz 26.5 24.0 23.0
@7GHz 25.5 21.5 20.0
@8GHz 25.5 21.5 20.0
@11GHz 24.5 22 18
@13GHz 24.5 20 18
@15GHz 24.5 20 18
@18GHz 22.5 19 17
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 188 of 223
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
@23GHz 22.5 19 16
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
0
Nominal maximum receive power (dBm)
–20
Frequency stability (ppm)
±5
Table 10-42 Transceiver Performance (HP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 30 28 24
@8GHz 30 28 24
@11GHz 28 26 21
@13GHz 26 23 18
@15GHz 26 23 18
@18GHz 25.5 22 17
@23GHz 25 22 17
@26GHz 25 22 17
@32GHz 23 21 16
@38GHz 23 20 16
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@7GHz 9
@8GHz 9
@11GHz 6
@13GHz 3
@15GHz 3
@18GHz 2
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 189 of 223
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM
@23GHz 2
@26GHz 2
@32GHz 1
@38GHz 1
Nominal maximum receive power (dBm)
–20
Frequency stability (ppm)
±5
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for fighting against multipath fading.
Table 10-43 Anti-multipath fading performance
Item Performance
STM-1/128QAM W-curve See Figure 10-1.
STM-1/128QAM W-curve 51 dB.
Figure 10-1 W-curve
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 190 of 223
10.5.6 IF Performance The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals.
Table 10-44 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals.
Table 10-45 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH signals
Adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals
Consisting of the 24-tap feed forward equalizer filter and the 3-tap decision feedback equalizer.
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link reliabilities.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 191 of 223
Table 10-46 Link reliability per hop
Performance Item
1+0 Non-protection Configuration
1+1 Protection Configuration
MTBF (h) 14.71x104 71.43x104
MTTR (h) 1 1
Availability 99.99932% 99.99986%
10.6 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 7500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 10-47 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received.
Table 10-47 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received
Item Standard
EMC CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 192 of 223
Item Standard
Laser safety FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection RoHS
10.7 Environmental Conditions The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation, and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.
The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the environmental conditions:
l ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location
l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection
10.7.1 Environment for Storage
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
10.7.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
10.7.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
Climatic Conditions Table 10-48 lists the climatic conditions for storage.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 193 of 223
Table 10-48 Climatic conditions for storage
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature –40 to +70
Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1 /min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Movement of surrounding air ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirements Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The cartons must be intact. l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. l There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed. l The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Conditions l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust. l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-49.
Table 10-49 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during storage
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 194 of 223
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3
l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-50.
Table 10-50 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 10-51 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 10-51 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration spectral density
- 0.02 m2/s3 -
Frequency 5 Hz to 20 Hz
10 Hz to 50 Hz
50 Hz to 100 Hz
Random vibration
dB/oct +12 - -12
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
Climatic Conditions Table 10-52 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 195 of 223
Table 10-52 Climatic conditions for transportation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature –40 to +70
Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1 /min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Movement of surrounding air ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirements Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l The cartons must be intact. l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons. l There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Biological Conditions l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust. l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-53.
Table 10-53 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during transportation
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Dust (suspension) No requirement
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h
Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3
l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-54.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 196 of 223
Table 10-54 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during transportation
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
Cl2 -
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 10-55 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation.
Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration spectral density
1 m2/s3 –3 dBA Random vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Response spectrum I (sample weight > 50 kg)
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each surface
Shock
Response spectrum II (sample weight ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 10 1.0
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 15 1.0
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 20 0.8
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 30 0.6
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 40 0.5
Fall-off
Weight (kg) < 50
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 197 of 223
Item Sub-Item Range Height (m) 0.4
Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 100 0.3
Weight (kg) Height (m)
> 100 0.1
NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
10.7.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
Climatic Conditions Table 10-56 and Table 10-57 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 7500 operates.
Table 10-56 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term working conditions
Short-term working conditions
Long-term working conditions
Short-term working conditions
0 to 45 –5 to +55 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 10-57 Other climatic conditions
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Rate of change of temperature ≤ 30 /h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 198 of 223
Item Range
Movement of surrounding air ≤ 5 m/s
Biological Conditions l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus. l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust. l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-58.
Table 10-58 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during operation
Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3
Dust (suspension) ≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 1.5 mg/m2·h
Sand ≤ 20 mg/m3
l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in Table 10-59.
Table 10-59 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during operation
Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 199 of 223
Mechanical Stress Table 10-60 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation.
Table 10-60 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item Sub-Item Range
Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2
Sinusoidal vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock response spectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on each surface
Shock
Static load 0 kPa
NOTE The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 10-61 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 10-61 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
SDH boards
T2SL64 30 1.1 T2SL64A 40 1.1
N1SL64 22 1.1 N1SLD64 41 1.2
N1SF64 23 1.1 N1SF16 26 1.1
N1SF64A 33 1.1 N1SL16A and N2SL16A
20 1.1
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SLQ16 21 0.9
N2SLQ16 38 1.3 N1SL4A 17 1.0
N1SL16 and N2SL16
20 1.1 N1SLD4A 17 1.0
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 200 of 223
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
N1SLO16 38 1.0 N1SLQ4A 17 1.0
N1SL4 and N2SL4
15 1.0 N1SL1A 17 1.0
N1SLD4 and N2SLD4
15 1.0 N1SLN 12 0.6
N1SLQ4 and N2SLQ4
16 1.0 N3SLD41 13 0.6
N1SL1 and N2SL1
14 1.0 N3SLQ41 14 0.6
N1SLQ1 and N2SLQ1
15 1.0 N1SLQ1A 17 1.0
N2SLO1 26 1.1 N1SLT1 15 1.2
N3SLO1 24 1.2 N3SLT1 25 1.3
N1SLH1 22 1.0 N1SEP1 and N1SEP
17 1.0
N1SLH1A 21 1.0 N1RPC01 110 4.0
N1RPC02 70 4.2 - - -
PDH boards
N1PD3 19 1.1 N2PQ3 13 0.9
N2PD3 12 0.9 N1PQ1 19 1.0
N1PL3 and N1PL3A
15 1.0 N2PQ1 13 1.0
N2PL3 and N2PL3A
12 0.9 N1PQM 22 1.0
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PQMA 21 1.0
N1DX1 15 (before the tributary protection switching (TPS)); 31 (after the TPS)
1.0 N1DXA 10 0.8
Interface boards and switching and bridging boards
N1MU04 2 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the 0.3
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 201 of 223
Board Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
TPS); 2 (after the TPS)
N1EU08 11 0.4 N1D12B 0 0.3
N1OU08 and N2OU08
6 0.4 N1D12S 0 (before the TPS); 9 (after the TPS)
0.4
N1D34S 0 (before the TPS); 2 (after the TPS)
0.4 N1D75S 0 (before the TPS); 6 (after the TPS)
0.4
N1TSB8 0 (before the TPS); 5 (after the TPS)
0.3 N1DM12 0 (before the TPS); 8 (after the TPS)
0.5
N1ETF8 2 0.4 N1ETS8 0 (before the TPS); 3 (after the TPS)
0.4
N1EFF8 6 0.4 - - -
Data boards
N1EAS2 70 1.2 N1ADL4 41 0.9
N1EFS4 30 1.0 N1ADQ1 41 1.0
N3EFS4 22 1.1 N1IDL4 41 1.0
N1EMS2 40 (with the electrical interface board); 54 (with the optical interface board)
0.8 N1EMS4 65 (with the electrical interface board); 75 (with the optical interface board)
1.1
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N1IDQ1 41 1.0
N3EGS2 25 1.0 N1MST4 26 0.9
N1EGT2 29 0.9 N2EGT2 15 0.9
N1EGS4 and N3EGS4
70 1.1 N1EFT8 and N1EFT8A
22 1.0
N4EGS4 43 0.7 N2EFS0 and N4EFS0
35 1.0
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N1EFS0A 33 (with the electrical interface board); 44 (with the
1.1
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 202 of 223
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
optical interface board)
N2EMR0 50 1.2 N5EFS0 26 (with the electrical interface board); 32 (with the optical interface board)
0.6
Cross-connect boards and system control boards
N2GSCC and N3GSCC
20 0.9 T1SXCSA 96 2.2
N4GSCC 19 1.0 T2UXCSA 69 2.1
N5GSCC 10 0.9 T1IXCSA 140 2.4
T1GXCSA 41 1.8 T1EXCSA 53 1.9
Other boards
TN11MR2 0.2 0.9 BA2 20 1.0
TN11MR4 0.2 0.9 N1BPA 20 1.0
N1MR2A 0 1.0 N2BPA 11 1.2
N1MR2C 0 1.0 61COA and N1COA
10 3.5
TN11CMR2
0.2 0.8 62COA 75 8
TN11CMR4
0.2 0.9 T1AUX 3 0.4
TN11OBU1
16 1.3 N1FANA 19 1.5
N1LWX 30 1.1 T1PIU 8 1.3
N1IFSD1 27 1.1 N1RPWR 45 1.4
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 203 of 223
11 Compliant Standards
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 204 of 223
Recommendation Description
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 205 of 223
Recommendation Description
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630 ATM protection switching
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
11.2 IEEE Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 11-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 206 of 223
Standard Description
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 1588 Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies
11.3 IETF Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IETF standards.
Table 11-3 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 207 of 223
Standard Description
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding
11.4 ANSI Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ANSI related standards.
Table 11-4 ANSI related standards
Standard Description
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
11.5 Environment Related Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the environment related standards.
Table 11-5 Environment related standards
Standard Description
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE
Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: Physical protection
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 208 of 223
11.6 EMC Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the EMC related standards.
Table 11-6 EMC related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
11.7 Safety Compliance Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 209 of 223
Table 11-7 Safety compliance related standards
Standard Description
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
11.8 Protection Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the protection related standards.
Table 11-8 Protection related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to surge overvoltages
11.9 ASON Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ASON related standards.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 210 of 223
Table 11-9 ASON related standards
Standard Description
G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471 (GMPLS)
Signaling functional description
11.10 Microwave Standards The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the microwave related standards.
Table 11-10 Microwave related standards
Standard Description
ITU-R F.384-7 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.383-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.385-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 7 GHz band
ITU-R F.386-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHz band
ITU-R F.387-9 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 11 GHz band
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 211 of 223
Standard Description
ITU-R F.497-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 13 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.636-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 15 GHz band
ITU-R F.595-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems operating in the 18 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.637-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 23 GHz band
ITU-R F.748-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands
ITU-R F.749-2 Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service operating in the 38 GHz band
ITU-R F.1191-1 1
Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay systems
ITU-R SM.329-10
Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain
ETSI EN 302 217-1 V1.1.4
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and system-independent common characteristics
ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1: System-dependent requirements for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302 217-3 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for equipment operating in frequency bands where no frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302 217-4-1 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1: System-dependent requirements for antennas
ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for antennas
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 212 of 223
Standard Description
ETSI EN 301 126-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1: Point-to-Point equipment - Definitions, general requirements and test procedures
ETSI EN 301 126-3-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1: Point-to-Point antennas; Definitions, general requirements and test procedures
ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems; Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits atequipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems
iec 60153-2-1974
Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for ordinary rectangular waveguides
iec 60154-2-1980
Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 213 of 223
12 Glossary
This chapter lists the glossary used in this manual.
1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.
10BASE-T 10Base-T is a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3i that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form using unshielded twisted pair (UTP) conductors with low cost Level 3 or better UTP wiring up to 100 meters (328 ft.). 10BaseT uses RJ45 connectors and sometimes 50-pin AMP connectors to a patch panel.
100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100Base-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.
3R Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
A
ADM A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several signals for transmission over a single medium. A demultiplexor completes the process by separating multiplexed signals from a transmission line.Frequently a multiplexor and demultiplexor are combined into a single device capable of processing both outgoing and incoming signals.
Alarm A means of alerting the operator that a specified abnormal condition exists.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 214 of 223
ALS A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
ATM Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a high-performance, cell-oriented switching and multiplexing technology that utilizes fixed-length packets to carry different types of traffic. ATM is a technology that will enable carriers to capitalize on a number of revenue opportunities through multiple ATM classes of services; high-speed local-area network (LAN) interconnection; voice, video, and future multimedia applications in business markets in the short term; and in community and residential markets in the longer term..
B
Bandwidth The range of frequencies a circuit will respond to or pass through. It may also be the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies of a signal.
C
Concatenation The process of summing the bandwidth of a number of smaller containers into a larger bandwidth container. Two versions exist: contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation.
Control plane The control plane performs the call control and connection control functions. Through signalling, the control plane sets up and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in support of call and connection control, such as routing information dissemination.
CoS Characteristics of a service such as described by service identity, virtual network, link capability requirements, QoS and traffic threshold parameters.
D
DNI DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.
E
Encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols in which a layer adds header information to the protocol data unit (PDU) from the layer above. As an example, in Internet terminology, a packet would contain a header from the physical layer, followed by a header from the network layer (IP), followed by a header from the transport layer (TCP), followed by the application protocol data.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 215 of 223
EPL A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
Ethernet The IEEE 802.3 standard for contention networks. Ethernet uses a bus or star topology and relies on the form of access known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to regulate communication line traffic. Network nodes are linked by coaxial cable, by fiber-optic cable, or by twisted-pair wiring. Data is transmitted in variable-length frames containing delivery and control information and up to 1,500 bytes of data. The Ethernet standard provides for baseband transmission at 10 megabits (10 million bits) per second and is available in various forms, including those known as Thin Ethernet, Thick Ethernet, 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseF, and 10BaseT. The IEEE standard dubbed 802.3z, or Gigabit Ethernet, operates at 10 times 100 Mbps speed.
ETSI ETSI standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL A service that is both a line service and a virtual private service.
Extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
F
Fairness algorithm
To ensure that all the stations can share the bandwidth fairly in the event of congestion or overload, RPR presents a special fair algorithm for fair bandwidth sharing and allocation.
FEC forward error correction (FEC) is a system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to its messages, which allows the receiver to detect and correct errors (within some bound) without the need to ask the sender for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is that retransmission of data can often be avoided, at the cost of higher bandwidth requirements on average, and is therefore applied in situations where retransmissions are relatively costly or impossible.
Fiber jumper Fiber that is used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
Forced switch An action when the network operator forces the network to use the protection resources instead of the working resources, or vice-versa, regardless of the state of the resources.
Frame In data transmission, the sequence of contiguous bits delimited by, and including, beginning and ending flag sequences.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 216 of 223
I
IMA Short for inverse multiplexing over ATM. IMA is a physical layer technology in which a high-speed stream of ATM cells is broken up and transmitted across multiple T1/E1 links, then is reconstructed back into the original ATM cell order at the destination. IMA is first standardized (v1.0) by the ATM Forum in1997, and updated (v1.1) in 1999.
IMA group IMA group refers to physical links grouped to form a higher-bandwidth logical link, whose rate is approximately the sum of the individual link rates.
Intelligent Network Service
An Intelligent Network service is a sophisticated telecommunication service. Its creation and its operation are facilitated by telecommunication network architecture, based on Intelligent Network (IN) concept.
J
Jitter The variation in the time taken for packets to be delivered to an endpoint or network entity.
L
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
M
Manual Switching
When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.
Map A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into Virtual Containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
MSP The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
O
ODU The ODU is the outdoor part of the OptiX RTN 600 system. It performs frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 217 of 223
Optical Amplifier
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in an suitable active medium.
Orderwire Orderwire is able to provide voice communication for operators or maintenance engineers at different workstation.
P
Paired slots A pair of slots whose overhead can be processed by the bus on the backplane. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board.
R
Ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
RPR Resilient packet ring (RPR) technology is optimized for robust and efficient packet networking over a fiber ring topology. It has resilient mechanisms such as dynamic bandwidth allocation through fairness algorithm, space multiplexing, and wrap protection. RPR nodes are connected in a ring topology by two fibers, each transmitting in the opposite direction. RPR networks delivers data, voice, and video services through packets.
S
SNCP A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SLA The contract between a service provider and the customer that specifies the level of service that will be provided.
T
TCM A method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the bit errors of each section can be monitored through TCM.
TCP/IP A suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones being TCP and IP.
Timeslot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect.
TPS In the optical transmission system, tributary protection switching (TPS) refers to the protection switching of tributary signals.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 218 of 223
Transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional transfer of user information, from one location to another. It can also provide transfer of some control and network management information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the transport network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.
V
VC Virtual concatenation is the primary enhancement to voice optimized SONET, in order to support the transport of variable bit data streams.
W
WTR A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 219 of 223
13 Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
A
ABR Available Bit Rate
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CF Compact Flash
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
D
DCC Data Communication Channels
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DDN Digital Data Network
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 220 of 223
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS General Multiprotocol Label Switching
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High level Data Link Control
I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 221 of 223
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LPT Link State Path Through
LSP Label Switch Path
M
MAC Media Access Control
MADM Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF Message Communication Function
MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
N
NEBS Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS Network Side
NSF Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
O
OADM Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
ODU Outdoor Unit
OSP OptiX Software Platform
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 222 of 223
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
Q
QoS Quality of Service
R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS Tributary Protection Switching
U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UPM Uninterrupted Power Modules
V
VC Virtual Channel
VCC Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VP Virtual Path
VPC Virtual Path Connection
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009
Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10) Commercial in Confidence Page 223 of 223
WTR Wait-to-Restore
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com